Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneKG290

KG290

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ -

Summary of content (248 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪ KG290‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
PAGE 2
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪13 KG290‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪123‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬
PAGE 3
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻝ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪37‬‬
PAGE 4
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪57
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫‪ DTMF‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮ
PAGE 6
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺃﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ( ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻻﺫﻧﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻻﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪.‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﻣﻐﻠﻖ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫* ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺎ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺃﺳﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ (.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻟﻴﺞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻊ ﻟﺒﻄﺎ ﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺧﺮ ﻟﺒﻄﺎ ﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ!‬ ‫• ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫• ﺍ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴ ًﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺰ ًﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻐﻴّﺮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 27
‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ T9‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺃ ﺏ ﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫؛ ‪.1 ! ، :‬‬ ‫ﺏﺕﺓﺙ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺃﺇﺁﻯﺅﺉء‪3‬‬ ‫ﺱﺵﺹﺽ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺫﺭﺯ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺝﺡﺥ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻥﻩﻭﻯ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻑﻕﻙﻝﻡ‪8‬‬ ‫ﻁﻅﻉﻍ‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪0 ،‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪123‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1.1‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 3.
PAGE 30
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1.4‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪ 2.4‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 3.4‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ FM 4.4‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 5.4‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2.5‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 4.5‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ 5.5‬ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6.5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ 7.5‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 8.5‬ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪ 9.5‬ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3.6‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 4.6‬ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 5.6‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 6.6‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.6.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺬﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻞ ‪ WTLS/TSL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.6.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.6.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻳﺒﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(7.6.1‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﺳﻜﺮﻳﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(8.6.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫)ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.
PAGE 35
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.
PAGE 36
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ,‬ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‪ ,‬ﺍﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ‪ ,‬ﺍﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.3‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ← ]ﺣﻔﻆ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺣﻔﻆ[ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 39
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺑﺪء[ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ]ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ . ,‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ”‪ “-‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.
PAGE 40
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻝ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪0.
PAGE 41
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.1.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.1.4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.3.1.4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.3.1.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ“‪” ,‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“‪” ,‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.3.1.
PAGE 42
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻪ )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺳﻢ(‪.
PAGE 43
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ٍ 10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫[‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ”ﻋﺎﻡ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.
PAGE 45
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺇﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ‬ ‫‪) SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ( ﻭ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪EMS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪ 300‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺇ ﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇ ﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪/‬ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ /‬ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻧﺺ ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ ،“SIM‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ“ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺩﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎً‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.7.5‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫“ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ” ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫]‪.[OK‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.7.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.8.5‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9.5‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.9.5‬‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ X400‬ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ‪ERMES‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.
PAGE 55
‫◄ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ\ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPG‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫”ﻋﺮﺽ“ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻙ‬ ‫ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﻛﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ّ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﺷﻲ ﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ MP4‬ﻭ‪AAC‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ M4A‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫◄ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻤّﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .WAP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.
PAGE 59
‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ‪/‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﻮ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺃﺧﺮﻯ“‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫”ﺃﺧﺮﻯ“ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ KG290‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪،USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ”ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ“‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫”ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ“‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺿﺮﺭﺍً ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ,‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ ,‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ,‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ,‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.8‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫)‪/SIM‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1000‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻸﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻤﺔ ‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺃ ﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇ ﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.8‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.7.8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.1.9‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 100%‬ﻭ ‪ %80‬ﻭ ‪ %60‬ﻭ ‪%40‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‪) .‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(5.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(6.3.
PAGE 69
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.4.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬‫◄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪.LG KG290‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.2.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ‪PCS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪1900‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EGSM/DCS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪ 900/1800‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.2.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.2.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.9‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.5.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻭ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.5.9‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(7.5.9‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪(2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻻﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ DTMF‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(8.5.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.6.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ ،“SIM‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.6.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(5.6.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN1‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ ،PIN1/PIN2‬ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN1/PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.9‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9.9‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪0.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪KG290 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎ ﻡ ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪C+55°CC:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪C-10°CC:‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬
PAGE 81
PAGE 82
PAGE 83
‫‪ KG290‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
PAGE 84
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫‪KG290‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪123‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪32‬
PAGE 85
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
PAGE 86
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
PAGE 87
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﯼ‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
PAGE 88
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬ ‫‪ KG290‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺸﻜﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎٌ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ!‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ!‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ KG290‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ!‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫◄ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫)ﭘﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰﯼ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ( ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﺐ )‪ (pace maker‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﯼ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﯼ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ‬
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫)‪ (LCD‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﻪ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎ ﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KG290‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻔﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ!‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫)ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻓﻴﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﮐﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫• ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ!‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺯﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﯼ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 109
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﯼ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ )‬ ‫( ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T9‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ T9 .
PAGE 111
‫‪ .1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﯼ ‪ T9‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪123‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 123‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ 4.1‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ‬ ‫‪ 4.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫‪ 5.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 5.2‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ 5.3‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 6.
PAGE 115
‫‪ .5‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2.5‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 4.5‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ 5.5‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 6.5‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ 7.5‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ 8.5‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫‪ 9.5‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.6‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 3.6‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 4.6‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 5.6‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ 6.6‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪1.7‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪2.7‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪5.7‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1.8‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫‪ 2.8‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ 4.8‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 5.
PAGE 116
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻓﻼﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.
PAGE 118
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(2.6.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(3.6.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(4.6.1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻔﺘﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﺒﻪ~ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﺒﻪ~ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﺸﻨﺒﻪ~ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫] ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‬ ‫]ﺷﺮﻭﻉ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪8.3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪0.3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻴﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﻫﺠﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ[ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪9.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪ KG290‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2.4‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3.4‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ 4 :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍﯼ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ MP3 ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4.4‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5.4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪) SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪) MMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.1.5‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﯼ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 131
‫ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ‬‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ‬‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ‬‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ‬‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﯼ ‪ :T9‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 132
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻛﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ‪ MMS‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪95‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻠﻮﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ”ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ“‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫”ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ“ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3.5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 136
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.7.5‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﺘﻦ[ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(2.7.5‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 137
‫◄ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪9.5‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.9.5‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﮐﺲ‪ ،.
PAGE 138
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ‬‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(3.9.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 140
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1.6‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 141
‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٤٣‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3.
PAGE 142
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4.6‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5.6‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.5.
PAGE 143
‫◄ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫)‪ (J2ME‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ”ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ“ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6.
PAGE 144
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪.a‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.b‬‬ ‫]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .c‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 147
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4.8‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻀﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5.8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6.8‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪7.8‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.7.8‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 149
‫◄ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1.9‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.1.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(2.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪،MM/DD/YYYY‬‬ ‫‪.YYYY/MM/DD ،DD/MM/YYYY‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ : D‬ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ : M /‬ﻣﺎﻩ ‪ : Y /‬ﺳﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(3.1.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ( ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(4.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2.
PAGE 151
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ‪ 4‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(2.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(8.3.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(9.3.9‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪،(On‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺸﮑﯽ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4.9‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.4.9‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ’ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‘ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ’ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‘ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 154
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(4.2.4.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(3.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ،USB‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(4.5.9‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(5.5.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(6.5.
PAGE 157
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.6.9‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎﯼ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 158
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(4.6.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﯼ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‪.
PAGE 159
‫◄ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(6.6.9‬‬ ‫ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ )ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺪﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪،2‬‬ ‫ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪/‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 160
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪9.9‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪0.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪-‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﯼ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪KG290 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪C+55°CC:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ ‪C-10°CC:‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬
PAGE 163
PAGE 164
PAGE 165
KG290 User Guide - English This document is the user guide for the LG KG290 Mobile Phone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics. Copying, modifying and distributing this document without the consent of LG Electronics are prohibited.
PAGE 166
Table of Contents Introduction For Your Safety 6 7 Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use 8 KG290 Features 15 Parts of the phone General Functions Browser 24 Making and answering calls Entering text 26 Changing the text input mode 27 Using the T9 Mode Using the ABC Mode 28 Using the 123 mode 29 Using the symbol mode Getting Started 19 Table of Contents 2 Installing the SIM card and battery Charging the Battery 22 Disconnecting the charger 23 Overview of Menu Functions 30 32 Home Bookmarks Enter
PAGE 167
Call history 35 Tools All calls Alarm clock Missed calls Calendar Dialled calls Calculator Received calls Call duration Memo 36 37 38 To do Multimedia 41 MP3 player All songs My playlist Settings Camera 42 Video camera 44 Call costs Stopwatch Data information Unit converter FM radio World time Voice recorder SIM services 39 45 40 Calendar settings Table of Contents 3
PAGE 168
Table of Contents Messaging 46 New message Text Multimedia Inbox 47 49 Drafts 50 Outbox 51 Sent Table of Contents 4 54 Profiles 62 55 56 Contacts 63 57 New contact 52 53 My stuff 58 64 Delete all Videos 59 Others 61 Games & Apps Groups 65 Copy all Sounds External memory 54 Search Speed dials Images Listen voicemail Info messages Read Topic Templates Text Multimedia Settings Text message Multimedia message Voicemail number Push message Info message Settings View options
PAGE 169
Settings 68 Date & Time Set date Date format Set time Time format Languages 70 Flight mode 79 Power save Reset 72 Memory status 73 74 Accessories 80 Technical data 81 75 76 78 Table of Contents Display Wallpaper Backlight timer 69 Brightness Home screen shortcut Theme Menu style Standby text Network name Colourful dial font Connectivity Bluetooth Network USB connection mode Call Call divert Answer mode Send my number Call waiting Minute minder Auto redial Select line Send DTMF tones Securi
PAGE 170
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KG290 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. Introduction 6 This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone.
PAGE 171
For Your Safety Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. CAUTION! • Switch off the phone in any area where required by special regulations. For example, do not use your phone in hospitals or it may affect sensitive medical equipment. • Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on your mobile phone for emergency calls.
PAGE 172
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use 8 Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver.
PAGE 173
] This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network.
PAGE 174
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use 10 * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band.
PAGE 175
] Do not drop. ] Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock. ] The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper. as alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your phone. There is a risk of this causing a fire. ] Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. ] Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips.
PAGE 176
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use ] Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. ] Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc. ] RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your motor vehicle such as a car stereo or safety equipment. ] If your vehicle is equipped with an Road safety Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use 12 Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive.
PAGE 177
Potentially explosive atmospheres ] Do not use the phone at a refueling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children's reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard. ] Do not transport or store In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. ] Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any aircraft. ] Do not use it on the ground without crew permission.
PAGE 178
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Battery information and care ] You do not need to completely Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use 14 discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery's performance. ] Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. ] Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. ] Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean.
PAGE 179
KG290 Features Parts of the phone Rear view Left side view Holes for a carrying strap Side keys ] In standby mode: Keypad volume adjustment. ] During a call: Earpiece volume adjustment.
PAGE 180
KG290 Features Open view Navigation keys ] In standby mode: Briefly: Write new Message (Hold down: present Messages pop-up) Briefly: List of Contacts Briefly: List of Profiles (Hold down: Activate/ Deactivate Vibrate mode) Briefly: List of Favourites ] In menu: scroll up & down Send key KG290 Features 16 Earpiece Main screen ] Top: Icons showing signal strength, battery level and various other functions ] Bottom: Soft key indications Left soft key/ Right soft key ] These keys perform the function Ind
PAGE 181
Display Information Icon area The screen displays several icons. These are described below. On-Screen Icons Text and graphic area Menu Area Contacts Right key indicators Description Tells you the strength of the network signal. You can use GPRS service. The alarm has been set and is on. The bluetooth is set to On. Tells you the status of the battery. You have received a text message. KG290 Features Displays various icons.
PAGE 182
KG290 Features Icon/Indicator Description You have received a voice message. Vibrate only menu in profile. Silent menu in profile. General menu in profile. Outdoor menu in profile. Headset menu in profile. KG290 Features 18 All calls are diverted. Indicates that the phone is accessing WAP. Note ] The quality of the conversation may change depending on network coverage. When the signal strength is below 2 bars, you may experience muting, call drop and poor audio.
PAGE 183
Getting Started Installing the SIM card and battery card, press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction. 1. Installing the SIM card. Your SIM card contains your phone number, service details and contacts and must be inserted into your handset. Make sure that the SIM card is properly inserted and the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards.
PAGE 184
Getting Started Note ] The metal contact of the SIM card can easily be damaged by scratches. Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling. Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card. 2. Installing the battery. Insert the battery aligning the gold contacts on the battery with the battery terminals (gold contacts) in the battery compartment. Then push down the top of the battery until it snaps into place.
PAGE 185
3. To remove the battery. Turn the power off. (If the power is left on, there is a chance you could lose the stored telephone numbers and messages.) Press the battery release latches and open the battery . Then remove the battery.
PAGE 186
Getting Started Charging the Battery Before connecting the travel adapter to the phone you must first install the battery. 2. Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the main socket. 3. The moving bars on the battery icon will stop after charging is complete. 4. Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone for the first time. Getting Started 22 1.
PAGE 187
WARNING! • Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal teeth or nails, come into contact with the battery. This may cause a fire. Disconnecting the charger Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone as shown in the diagram below.
PAGE 188
General Functions Making and answering calls Making a voice call 1. Enter the number including the full area code, or select the phone number from call logs by pressing . ] To delete a digit press . To delete all digits press and hold . 2. Press General Functions 24 to make the call. 3. Press to finish the call, or close the handset. Making a voice call from Contacts It is easy to call anyone whose number you have stored in your Contacts. 1. Press list. to access the contacts 2.
PAGE 189
In idle mode with the phone open, you can adjust the key volume using . Answering a call When you receive a call, the phone rings and the flashing phone icon appears on the screen. If the caller can be identified, the caller’s phone number (or name if stored in your Contacts) is displayed. ] To reject an incoming call, press or the right soft key twice. ] If you set Answer mode as Slide open (Menu 9.5.2), you can answer the call simply by opening the slide. 2.
PAGE 190
General Functions Signal strength You can check the strength of the signal by the signal indicator ( ) on the left top of your phone screen. Signal strength can vary, particularly inside buildings. Moving close to a window may improve reception. Entering text General Functions 26 You can enter alphanumeric characters using the keypad. For example, storing names in Contacts, writing a message, creating a personal greeting or scheduling events in the calendar all require entering text.
PAGE 191
123 mode (Number mode) Type numbers using one keystroke per number. To change to 123 mode in a text entry field, press until 123 mode is displayed. Changing the text input mode 2. Press to switch between T9Abc, T9abc, T9ABC, ABC, Abc, abc and 123. The T9 predictive text input mode allows you to enter words easily with a minimum number of key presses. As you press each key, the handset begins to display the characters that it thinks you are typing based on a built-in dictionary.
PAGE 192
General Functions ] If the word is still incorrect after typing completely, press once or more to scroll through the other word options. Example Press to type Good. Press to get Home. ] If the desired word is missing from the word choices list, add it by using the ABC mode. 2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any keystrokes. General Functions 28 3. Complete each word with a space by pressing . To delete letters, press Press and hold down entire words. .
PAGE 193
Key Characters in the order display Using the 123 (Number) mode Upper Case The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode. Lower Case .,/?!-:'"@1 .
PAGE 194
Overview of Menu Functions You can launch a menu by pressing in the idle screen. Move to the desired item and press to go into the sub menu. From the main menu you can also go into a submenu by directly pressing the corresponding numeric key as follows. The main menu consists of the following top menus and sub menus. Overview of Menu Functions 30 3. Tools 1. Browser 2. Call history 1.1 Home 2.1 All calls 3.1 Alarm clock 1.2 Bookmarks 2.2 Missed calls 3.2 Calendar 1.3 Enter address 2.
PAGE 195
4. Multimedia 4.1 MP3 player 4.2 Camera 4.3 Video camera 4.4 FM radio 4.5 Voice recorder 5.1 New message 5.2 Inbox 5.3 Drafts 5.4 Outbox 5.5 Sent 5.6 Listen voicemail 5.7 Info messages 5.8 Templates 5.9 Settings 6.1 Images 6.2 Sounds 6.3 Videos 6.4 Others 6.5 Games & Apps 6.6 External memory 7. Profiles 7.1 General 7.2 Silent 7.3 Vibrate only 7.4 Outdoor 7.5 Headset 8. Contacts 8.1 Search 8.2 New contact 8.3 Speed dials 8.4 Groups 8.5 Copy all 8.6 Delete all 8.7 Settings 8.8 Information 9.
PAGE 196
Browser Home Menu 1.1 You can launch the web browser and access the homepage of the web service provided by your Service Provider. Bookmarks Menu 1.2 You can store frequently accessed or favourite URLs/Pages. Several preconfigured URLs are stored as bookmarks. Adding a new bookmark 1. Select New Bookmark from the Options menu. Browser 32 2. Enter the title and associated URL information. 3. Press the left soft key [SAVE] to save.
PAGE 197
History Menu 1.4 Shows the list of web pages titles accessed recently. You can access the web page easily. Saved pages Menu 1.5 The phone can save the page on display as an offline file. Settings Menu 1.6 You can change the settings for browser display, security, and certificates. (Menu 1.6.1) Select the appropriate profile by pressing . Then select activate option, This will activate the profile to initiate the browser launch. (Menu 1.6.2) You can change the browser screen size.
PAGE 198
Browser Security Certificates (Menu 1.6.5) If stored, a list of root/ca certificates required for WTLS/TLS can be found here. Certificates can be viewed from the list. Show image (Menu 1.6.6) Allows you to enable or disable the image display during browsing. Note ] Enabling this function will delay displaying images until the completion of transmission. Disabling this function will prevent the browser from downloading images from the server, thus allowing faster transmission.
PAGE 199
Call history You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. All calls Menu 2.1 Menu 2.2 Allows you to view missed call records, make a call, send a message and save the number in Contacts. Dialled calls Menu 2.
PAGE 200
Call history Call duration Menu 2.5 Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. You can also reset the call times. The following timers are available: Call costs Menu 2.6 Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls, remaining and reset the cost. To reset the cost, you need to enter PIN2 code. ] Last call: Length of the last call. ] Dialled calls: Length of the outgoing calls. ] Received calls: Length of the incoming calls.
PAGE 201
Tools Alarm clock Menu 3.1 You can set the alarm clock to go on at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. 2. Select the repeat period: Once, Mon-Fri, Mon-Sat, Sat~Sun, Sat~Wed, Sat~Thu, Sun~Thu. and Everyday. 3. Select the alarm tone you want and press [Save]. Calendar Menu 3.2 Calculator Menu 3.3 This contains the standard functions such as +, -, x, ÷ : Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division.
PAGE 202
Tools 2. Use a navigation key to select a sign for calculation. 3. Then input the numbers. 4. Press key to view the result. 5. To input the decimal number, press key. 6. To end Calculator, press the right soft key Memo Tools 38 Menu 3.4 1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key [OK]. 2. If the entry is empty, press the left soft key [New]. 3. Input the memo and then press left soft key [Options] > [Save]. Note ] If you want to change the text input mode, press the To do in order.. Menu 3.
PAGE 203
Stopwatch Menu 3.6 1. Press [Start] to take time and record the lap time by pressing [Lap]. 2. Press [Stop] to ascertain the record of lap time. 3. Press [Reset] to default condition. Unit converter Menu 3.7 This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 7 types that can be converted into units: Currency, Area, Length, Weight, Temperature, Volume and Velocity. 3. Select the standard value by using , . World time Menu 3.8 You can view clocks of the world's major cities. 1.
PAGE 204
Tools SIM services Menu 3.9 This is a SIM service menu. It depends on SIM and the network services. Calendar settings Menu 3.0 In this menu, you can set a base time format for the calendar.(A.
PAGE 205
Multimedia MP3 player All songs Menu 4.1 (Menu 4.1.1) You can view all the music files stored in the phone/external memory. My playlist (Menu 4.1.2) You can create your own playlists by choosing tracks from the All songs menu list. Settings (Menu 4.1.3) Equalizer (Menu 4.1.3.3) You can choose the equalizer among several genres of music. Jazz, Rock, Pop, etc. Player skin (Menu 4.1.3.4) There are 3 kinds of player skin and you can change it as you want. Multimedia Shuffle (Menu 4.1.3.
PAGE 206
Multimedia Camera Menu 4.2 Using the camera module built in your phone, you can take pictures. Additionally, you can send photos to other people and select photos as wallpaper. indicator Options Multimedia 42 Album • To take a picture Hold down the camera button. - To take clear pictures, press the camera button while holding the camera without any movement. - Appropriately adjust distance to the object that you want take a picture of (more than 50 cm).
PAGE 207
1. Hold down the in standby mode. ] Save to [ ]: You can set the space after taking a picture. (External/Phone) 2. Focus on the subject to capture the image, and then press [OK]. 3. If you want to save it, press [OK]. ] Resolution [ ]: Allows you to set the image size. (1280x960) (640x480) and (320x240). Multishot is only available with the (320x240), (640x480) pixel resolution. ] Quality [ ]: Allows you to set the image quality from Normal, Fine and Super fine.
PAGE 208
Multimedia Video camera Menu 4.3 FM radio Menu 4.4 1. Select Video camera menu. 2. Video camera settings menu is the same with Photo camera settings, except following items: Options Multimedia Press the to record the image. ] Mode [ ]: Record a video in General/MMS mode. ] Resolution [ 44 Album 128X96 ]: 176X144, Title Descriptions Frequency Shows the frequency indicating the current cursor.
PAGE 209
You can search radio stations and enjoy listening to the radio. 1. Press the corresponding number key of a channel to store the currently selected radio station. Voice recorder Menu 4.5 In this feature you can record over 10 voice memos, up to a maximum of 60 seconds each. 2. After presetting radio channels, you can listen to other channel by pressing the corresponding number key (short press).
PAGE 210
Messaging New message Menu 5.1 This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), voice mail, as well as the network’s service messages. Text (Menu 5.1.1) ] Send to: Sends text messages. 1. Enter numbers of recipient. 2. Press recipients. key to add more 3. You can add phone numbers in the address book. You can write and edit text message. 4. Press the [Option] and then press send after entering numbers. 1.
PAGE 211
- Text templates: You can use Text templates already set in the phone. - Contacts: You can add phone numbers present in address book. - My business card: You can add your Business card to the message. ] Save to drafts: Stores messages in Drafts. ] T9 languages: Select the ] New T9 word: Select the New T9 word for inputting New word into the dictionary. while writing SMS. ] Exit: If you press Exit while writing a message, you can end the writing message and back to the new Message menu.
PAGE 212
Messaging Maximum available file size, that can be inserted to MMS-message, is 300 kb. Options ] Send to: You can send multimedia messages to multiple recipients, priorities your message, and make it sent later as well. ] Insert: You can add Symbol, Image, Video, Sound, New slide, New photo, New video, New sound, Text template, Contact, My Business card, Others. Note ] All messages will be automatically Messaging 48 saved in the outbox folder, after a sending failure.
PAGE 213
Inbox Menu 5.2 You will be alerted when you have received messages. They will be stored in Inbox. If the phone shows ‘No space for SIM message’, you have to delete only SIM messages from Inbox. If the phone displays ‘No space for message’, you can make space of each repository as deleting messages, media and applications. Note ] SIM message: SIM message To read a message, select one of the messages by pressing the left soft key . ] View: You can view the received messages.
PAGE 214
Messaging ] Information: You can view information about received messages; Sender’s address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size. ] Multi delete: After selecting the messages you want to remove, you can delete the selected messages. ] Delete all read: You can delete all read messages. ] Delete all: You can delete all messages. Messaging 50 Drafts Menu 5.3 Using this menu, you can preset multimedia messages that you use most frequently.
PAGE 215
] Delete all: Deletes all of the messages in the folder. Outbox Menu 5.4 The Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Failed messages are also placed in the Outbox. ] View: You can view the message. ] Delete: You can delete the message. ] Resend: You can resend the message. ] Edit: You can edit the message. information of each message. Multi delete: Deletes selected drafts at one time. Delete all: You can delete all the messages in the outbox. Sent Menu 5.
PAGE 216
Messaging Info messages Menu 5.7 (Dependent to network and subscription) Info service messages are text messages delivered by the network to your handset. They provide general information such as weather reports, traffic news, taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices. Messaging 52 When you receive an info service message, you will see a popup message show you that or the info service message is directly displayed. To view the message again follow the sequence shown below; Read (Menu 5.7.1) 1.
PAGE 217
] Active list: You can select info service message numbers in the active list. if you activate an info service number, you can receive messages sent from the number. Templates Text The following options are available. ] View: Select this to view the selected template. ] Edit: Use this to edit the selected template. ] Menu 5.8 (Menu 5.8.1) The followings are pre-defined text templates. • Please call me back. • I’m late.
PAGE 218
Messaging Multimedia (Menu 5.8.2) After you have saved a new template, you can use the following options. Text message ] Menu 5.9 (Menu 5.9.1) Message types: ] View: Text, Voice, Fax, Natl. paging, X.400, Email, ERMES ] Edit: Usually, the type of message is set to Text. You can convert your text into alternative formats. Contact your service provider for the availability of this function. You can see multimedia templates. You can edit multimedia templates.
PAGE 219
When a message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. ] Validity period: This network ] Message centre number: Saves in this menu, you can check whether your message is sent successfully. ] Reply charging: or changes the number of your SMS centre when sending text messages. You must obtain this number from your service provider. Multimedia message (Menu 5.9.2) ] Subject: You can enter multimedia messages subject when this menu is on.
PAGE 220
Messaging multimedia messages only when you are registered to your home network (not roaming). ] Network profiles: If you select the multimedia message server, you can set the URL for the multimedia message server. ] Permitted message type - Personal: Personal message. - Advertisements: Commercial message. - Information: Necessary information. Messaging 56 Voicemail number (Menu 5.9.3) You can receive voicemail if your network service provider supports this feature.
PAGE 221
Info message ] (Menu 5.9.5) Receive - On: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. - Off: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. ] ] Languages - You can select the language you want by pressing . Then, the info service message will be shown in the language that you have selected. Alert - On: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service messages.
PAGE 222
My stuff Images Menu 6.1 The Images folder consists of embedded links for downloading pictures through the Internet. Pictures taken using the camera are stored in the Images folder and you can create new folders to manage them. When a download link is selected, the following options will be displayed by pressing the left soft key [Options]. ] View: You can view the picture. ] Set as: You can set as wallpaper or picture ID(contact image). My stuff ] File info: You can view the file information.
PAGE 223
] File > Information/ File info: You can view the file information. ] New folder: You can create a new folder within the folder currently selected. ] Multi delete: Deletes the selected sound. ] Delete all: Deletes all sound files. ] Sort by: You can sort the files by date, type or name. Videos again to start playing. The followings are available using the left soft key [Options] in the Video list.
PAGE 224
My stuff ] Multi delete: Deletes the selected video file. ] Delete all: Deletes all video files. You can view a video using the video player. Video files are displayed in the list as thumbnails. You can select a desired video by using the / / / . Select a desired video and select Play to view the recorded video. Select the left soft key [Send] to attach the selected video to a message, Email. My stuff 60 When option 1.
PAGE 225
Others Menu 6.4 Note Any type of file can be stored here. This folder is mainly used for transporting files from one PC to another. ] When you format your SD Card, you Games & Apps Note Menu 6.5 In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. External memory Menu 6.6 1. This function will only work in the idle mode. 2. Please do not try to disconnect the cable while you are transferring files.
PAGE 226
Profiles In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: General, Silent, Vibrate only, Outdoor and Headset. Each profile can be personalised (Except Vibrate only, Silent menu).
PAGE 227
Contacts Search Menu 8.1 1. Select Search by press the left soft key [OK]. 2. Enter the name that you want to search. Note ] Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name. 3. If you want to edit, delete, copy an entry, or to add the voice to one, select left soft key [Options]. The following menu will be displayed. number, group, ringtone and picture by using the navigation key.
PAGE 228
Contacts New contact Menu 8.2 You can add phonebook entry by using this function. Phone memory capacity is 1000 entries. SIM card memory capacity depends on the cellular service provider. The number of character is SIM dependent feature. Note ] Maximum stored name and number length depends on SIMcard type. Contacts 64 5. You can set a ringtone and a photo for the entry by pressing left soft key [Options]. Speed dials Menu 8.3 You can assign any of the keys to with a Name list entry.
PAGE 229
4. After assigning the number as speed dial, you can change and delete the entry. You can also make a call or send a message to this number. ] Remove member: You can remove the member from the Group member list. But the name and the number will be remained in phonebook. ] Remove all members: Allows Groups Menu 8.4 You can list up to the members per each group. There are 7 groups you can make lists to. ] View members: Shows the group members you have selected.
PAGE 230
Contacts ] Phone to SIM: You can copy the entry from Phone memory to SIM Card. Delete all Menu 8.6 You can delete all entries from SIM or Phone. ] Name only: Set the phonebook list with displaying only name. ] With picture: Set the phonebook list with the information of picture. Name and number: Set the phonebook list with name and number. Information Settings 1. Press the right soft in standby mode. Menu 8.7 [Contacts] 2. Scroll to Settings, then press the left soft key [OK]. Menu 8.
PAGE 231
] My Business card This option allows you to create your own business card featuring Name and an mobile phone number. To create a new business card, press the left soft key [New] and enter the information into the fields. If you want to edit, delete or to send a business card, select left soft key [options].
PAGE 232
Settings Date & Time Menu 9.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set date (Menu 9.1.1) Time format (Menu 9.1.4) You can set the time format between 24 hours and 12 hours. You can enter the current date. Date format (Menu 9.1.2) You can set the Date format such as YYYY/MM/DD, DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Set time (Menu 9.1.3) You can enter the current time. Settings 68 Languages Menu 9.
PAGE 233
Backlight timer (Menu 9.3.2) Menu style (Menu 9.3.6) You can set the light-up duration of the display. You can select the desired menu style (Grid view or List view). Brightness Standby text (Menu 9.3.3) You can set the brightness of LCD: 100%, 80%, 60%, 40% Home screen shortcut (Menu 9.3.4) Selecting On displays the functionalities of 4 Navigation keys and Menu key as pictures on the middle of the idle window. (Profiles/Messaging/ Favourites/ Contacts) (Menu 9.3.
PAGE 234
Settings Connectivity Bluetooth Settings 70 Menu 9.4 (Menu 9.4.1) Bluetooth connection Your phone has built-in Bluetooth wireless technology which makes it possible for you to connect your phone wirelessly to other Bluetooth devices such as a handsfree, PC, PDA or other phones. You can, for example, have a conversation via a cordless Bluetooth handsfree or browse the Internet, wirelessly connected via a mobile phone. You can also exchange, for example, business cards, calendar items and pictures.
PAGE 235
] Automatic: If you select Automatic mode, the phone will automatically search for and select a network for you. Once you have selected “Automatic”, the phone will be set to “Automatic” even though the power is off and on. ] Manual: The phone will find the list of available networks and show you them. Then you can select the network which you want to use if this network has a roaming agreement with your home network operator.
PAGE 236
Settings GPRS attach (Menu 9.4.2.3) You can set GPRS service depending on various situations. Access point (Menu 9.4.2.4) Allow you to select the access point from the list. USB connection mode (Menu 9.4.3) You can choose one mode among Data service and Mass storage. When you have finished using the phone memory, click Exit and take the following steps. Caution ] Before you remove the cable, it is Settings 72 necessary that you click Exit. Or, the integrity of transferred data is not guaranteed. 1.
PAGE 237
Call divert (Menu 9.5.1) The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider. ] All voice calls: Diverts voice calls unconditionally. ] Cancel all: Cancels all call divert service. The submenus Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. ] Activate: Activates the ] If busy: Diverts voice calls when corresponding service. the phone is in in-call or call is rejected by user.
PAGE 238
Settings Answer mode (Menu 9.5.2) ] Slide open: If you select this menu, you can receive an incoming call when you open the slide. ] Any key: If you select this menu, you can receive a call by pressing any key except [End] key and [Volume] key. ] Send key only: If you select this menu, you can receive a call by pressing [Send] key only. Send my number Settings 74 (Menu 9.5.
PAGE 239
Minute minder (Menu 9.5.5) If you select On, you can check the call duration by a beep sound given every minute during a call. Auto redial Send DTMF tones (Menu 9.5.8) You can send touch tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. (Menu 9.5.6) Allows you to set the auto redial function when a call attempt has failed. Security Select line In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on.
PAGE 240
Settings 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. 4. If you enter the wrong PIN code more than 3 times, the phone will lock out. If the PIN is blocked, you will need to key in the PUK code. Settings 76 Phone lock (Menu 9.6.3) You can use a security code to avoid unauthorized use of the phone. Whenever you switch on the phone, the phone will request security code if you set phone lock to When switch on. 5. You can enter your PUK code up to 10 times.
PAGE 241
] All outgoing The barring service for all outgoing calls. ] Outgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls. ] O/G international except home country The barring service for all international outgoing calls except home network. ] All incoming The barring service for all incoming calls. ] Incoming when abroad You can cancel all barring services. ] Change password You can change the password for Call Barring Service.
PAGE 242
Settings Fixed dial number (Menu 9.6.5) (SIM dependent) You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. ] On: You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. ] Off: You can cancel fixed dialling function. ] Settings 78 Number list: You can view the number list saved as Fixed dial number. Change codes (Menu 9.6.6) PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorized person.
PAGE 243
Flight mode Menu 9.7 Power save Menu 9.8 This allows you to use only the phone’s features that do not require the use of the wireless network when you are in an airplane or in places where the wireless network is prevented. If you set On, you can save the power when you don’t use the phone. If you set the flight mode on, the icon will be displayed on the screen instead of the network signal icon. You can initialize all factory defaults. You will need Security code to activate this function.
PAGE 244
Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Standard Battery Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. Accessories 80 Portable Handsfree Note This connects to your phone, allowing handsfree operation. ] Always use genuine LG accessories. ] Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty.
PAGE 245
Technical data General Product name : KG290 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C Min : -10°C Technical data 81
PAGE 246
PAGE 247
PAGE 248